blob: 8e821d9b9fabb27c265d7f9d0adb088dc47977e2 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
62 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc(
64 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
65
66static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
67 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
68 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000069
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000070static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000071 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
72 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000074static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
75 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
76 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000078static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
79 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
80 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
81 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
82 "predicated store"));
83
84static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
85 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
87 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
88
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000089static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
90 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
91 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
92 "executed"));
93
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000094static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
95 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
96 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
97 "speculatively executed instructions"));
98
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000099STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
101 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
102STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
103 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
104STATISTIC(
105 NumLookupTablesHoles,
106 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000107STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000108STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
109 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000110STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000111
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000112namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000113// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
114// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
115// cases composing the case group.
116typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000117 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000118// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
119// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
120// switch for that PHI.
121typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000123/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
124struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
125 ConstantInt *Value;
126 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000127
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
132 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
133 return Value < RHS.Value;
134 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000135
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
137};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000140 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000141 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000142 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000143 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000144 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
147 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000148 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000149 BasicBlock *Pred,
150 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000151 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
152 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000153
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000154 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000155 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000156 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
157 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000158 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000159 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000160 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000161 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
163 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000166 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000167 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
168 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
169 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
170 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
172};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000173}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000175/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000176/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000177static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 if (SI1 == SI2)
179 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000181 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
182 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
183 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
184 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
185 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000186 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000187
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000188 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
189 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
190 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000191 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
192 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
193 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
194 return false;
195 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000196
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000197 return true;
198}
199
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000200/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
201/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
202/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000203static bool
204isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
205 Instruction *Cond,
206 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
207 if (SI1 == SI2)
208 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000209 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
210
211 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000212 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000213 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
214 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
215 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
216 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000217 if (!Ci2)
218 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000219 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
220 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
221 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
222 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
223 return false;
224
225 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
226 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000227 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000228 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
229 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
230 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000231 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
232 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000233 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000234 return false;
235 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
236 }
237 return true;
238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
241/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
242/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
243/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000244static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
245 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000246 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
247 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000248
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000249 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000250 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000251 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000252}
253
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000254/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
255/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
256/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000257/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000258static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000259 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000260 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000261 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000262 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000263}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000264
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000265/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
266/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000267/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
268/// which works well enough for us.
269///
270/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000271/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
272/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
273/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
274/// set and true is returned.
275///
276/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
277/// Select whose cost is 2.
278///
279/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
280/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
281/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000282static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000283 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000284 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000285 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
286 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000287 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
288 // so limit the recursion depth.
289 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
290 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
291 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
292 return false;
293
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000294 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000295 if (!I) {
296 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
297 // can be executed unconditionally.
298 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
299 if (C->canTrap())
300 return false;
301 return true;
302 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000303 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000304
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000305 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000306 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000307 if (PBB == BB)
308 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000309
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000310 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
311 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000312 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
313 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000314 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000315 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000316
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000317 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
318 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 if (!AggressiveInsts)
320 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000321
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000322 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000323 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
324 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000325
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000326 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
327 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
328 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000329 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000330 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000331
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000332 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000333
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000334 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
335 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
336 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
337 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
338 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
339 // enabled further IR optimizations.
340 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
341 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000342 return false;
343
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000344 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
345 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000346
347 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
348 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000349 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000350 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
351 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 return false;
353 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
354 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000355 return true;
356}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000357
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000358/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000359/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000360static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000361 // Normal constant int.
362 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000363 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000364 return CI;
365
366 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
367 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000369
370 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
371 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
372 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
373
374 // IntToPtr const int.
375 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
376 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
377 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
378 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
379 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
380 return CI;
381 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000382 return cast<ConstantInt>(
383 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000384 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000385 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000386}
387
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000388namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000389
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000390/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
391/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
392/// structure.
393/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
394/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
395/// representing the different cases for the switch.
396/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
397/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
398/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
399/// fail.
400struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000401 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000402 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
403 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
404 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
405 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000406
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000407 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
409 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
410 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000411 }
412
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000414 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000415 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000416 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000417
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000418private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000419 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
420 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
421 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
423 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424 CompValue = NewVal;
425 return (CompValue != nullptr);
426 }
427
428 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
429 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
430 /// match depending on isEQ).
431 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
432 /// against is placed in CompValue.
433 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
434 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000435 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
437 ICmpInst *ICI;
438 ConstantInt *C;
439 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000440 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000441 return false;
442 }
443
444 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000445 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000446
447 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000448 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000450 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000451
452 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
453 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
454
455 /*
456 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
457 x : BITVECTOR(64);
458 y : BITVECTOR(64);
459 z : BITVECTOR(64);
460 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
461 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
462 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
463 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000464 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
465 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
466 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000467 */
468
469 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
470 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
471 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
472 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
473 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
474 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
475 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
476
477 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
478 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
479 //
480 // mask = (1 << z)
481 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
482 //
483 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
484 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
485
486 // Pattern match a special case:
487 /*
488 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
489 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
490 );
491 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000492 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000493 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
494 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000495 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000497 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000498 return false;
499
500 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000501 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000502 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
503 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000504 UsedICmps++;
505 return true;
506 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000507 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000508
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000509 // Pattern match a special case:
510 /*
511 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
512 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
513 );
514 */
515 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
516 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
517 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
518 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
519 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
520 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
521 return false;
522
523 Vals.push_back(C);
524 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
525 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
526 UsedICmps++;
527 return true;
528 }
529 }
530
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000532 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 return false;
534
535 UsedICmps++;
536 Vals.push_back(C);
537 return ICI->getOperand(0);
538 }
539
540 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000541 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
542 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543
544 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
545 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
546 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000547 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
548 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
550 }
551
552 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
553 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
554 // x != 0 && x != 1.
555 if (!isEQ)
556 Span = Span.inverse();
557
558 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
559 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
560 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000561 }
562
563 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000564 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000565 return false;
566
567 // Add all values from the range to the set
568 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
569 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000570
571 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000572 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000573 }
574
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000575 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
577 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
578 /// vector.
579 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000580 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000581 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
582 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000583
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
585 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000586 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000587
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000588 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000589 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000591
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000592 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000593 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000594
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000595 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
596 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
597 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000598 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
599 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
600 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
601 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000602 continue;
603 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000604
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000606 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000607 // Match succeed, continue the loop
608 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000609 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000610
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
612 // comparison against the same value as the others.
613 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
614 if (!Extra) {
615 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000616 continue;
617 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000618 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
619 CompValue = nullptr;
620 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000621 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000622 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000624}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000625
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000626static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000627 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000628 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
629 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
630 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
631 if (BI->isConditional())
632 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000633 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
634 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000635 }
636
637 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000638 if (Cond)
639 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000640}
641
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000642/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000643/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000644Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000645 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000646 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
647 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
648 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000649 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
650 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
651 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000652 CV = SI->getCondition();
653 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000654 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000655 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000656 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000657 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000658 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000659
660 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000661 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000662 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
663 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000664 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000665 CV = Ptr;
666 }
667 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000668 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000669}
670
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000671/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000672/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000673BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
674 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000675 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000676 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000677 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
678 ++i)
679 Cases.push_back(
680 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000681 return SI->getDefaultDest();
682 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000683
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000684 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000685 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000686 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000687 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
688 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000689 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690}
691
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000692/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000693/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000694static void
695EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
696 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000697 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000698}
699
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000700/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000701static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
702 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000703 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
704
705 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
706 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
707 std::swap(V1, V2);
708
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000709 if (V1->size() == 0)
710 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000711 if (V1->size() == 1) {
712 // Just scan V2.
713 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
714 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
715 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
716 return true;
717 }
718
719 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
720 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
721 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
722 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
723 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
724 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
725 return true;
726 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
727 ++i1;
728 else
729 ++i2;
730 }
731 return false;
732}
733
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000734/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
735/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
736/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
737/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
738/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000739bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
740 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000741 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000742 if (!PredVal)
743 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000744
745 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
746 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000747 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
748 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000749
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000750 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
751 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
752
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000753 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000754 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000755 BasicBlock *PredDef =
756 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
757 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000758
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000759 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000761 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000762 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000763
764 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
765 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
766 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
767 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
768 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
769 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000770 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000771 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000772
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000773 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
774 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
775 // uncond br.
776 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
777 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000778 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000779 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000780
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000781 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000782 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000783
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000784 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000785 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
786 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000787
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000788 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
789 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000790 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000791
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000792 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
793 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000794 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000795 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
796 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000798 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000799 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000800
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000801 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
802 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000803 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000804 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
805 if (HasWeight)
806 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
807 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000808 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000809 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
810 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000811 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
812 --i;
813 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000814 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000816 Weights.pop_back();
817 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000818 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
819 SI->removeCase(i);
820 }
821 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000822 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000823 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000824 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
825 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000826
827 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000828 return true;
829 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000830
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000831 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
832 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000833 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000835 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
836 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000837 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000838 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000839 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
840 }
841 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000842
843 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
844 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000845 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
847 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
848 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
849 break;
850 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000851
852 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000853 if (!TheRealDest)
854 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000855
856 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
857 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000858 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
859 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
860 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000861 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000862 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000863
864 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000865 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000866 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867
868 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000869 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
870 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000871
872 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
873 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000874}
875
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000876namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000877/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
878/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
879/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
880struct ConstantIntOrdering {
881 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
882 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
883 }
884};
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000885}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000886
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000887static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
888 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
889 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
890 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000891 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000892 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000893 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000894}
895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000896static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000897 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000898 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000899 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000900 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
901
902 return false;
903}
904
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000905/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
906/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
907/// metadata.
908static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
909 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000910 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911 assert(MD);
912 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000913 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000914 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000915 }
916
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000917 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
918 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
919 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000920 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000921 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
922 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
923 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
924 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000925 }
926}
927
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000928/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000929static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000930 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
931 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
932 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
933 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
934 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000935 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000936}
937
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000938/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
939/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000940/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
941/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000942bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
943 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000944 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000945 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000946 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
947 bool Changed = false;
948
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000949 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000950 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000951 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000952
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000953 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
954 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000955 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956
957 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
958 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000959 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000960 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
961
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000962 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000963 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
964
965 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
966 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
967 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000968 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000969
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000970 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
971 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000972 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
973 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
974
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000975 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000976 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000977 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000978 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
979 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
980 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000981 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
982 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
983 // successor's weights
984 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000985
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000986 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000987 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000988 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000989 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000990 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
991 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
992 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000993 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000994
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000995 if (PredDefault == BB) {
996 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
997 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000998 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000999 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1000 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1001 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1002 else {
1003 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1004 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001005
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001006 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1007 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001008 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1009 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001010 Weights.pop_back();
1011 }
1012
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001013 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001014 --i;
1015 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001016 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001017
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001018 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1020 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1021 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1022 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1023 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001024
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001025 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1026 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001027 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1028 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1029 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1030 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1031 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001032 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1033 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1034 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1035 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001036 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1037 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001038 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001039 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001041 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1042 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1043 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1044 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1045 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1046 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1047 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1048 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001049 } else {
1050 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1051 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1052 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001053 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1054 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001055 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1056 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1057 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001058
1059 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001060 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1061 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001062 Weights.pop_back();
1063 }
1064
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001065 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1066 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001067 --i;
1068 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001069 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001070
1071 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1072 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001073 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1074 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1075 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001076 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1077 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001078 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1079 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001080 PTIHandled.erase(
1081 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001082 }
1083
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001084 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1085 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001086 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001087 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001088 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1089 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001090 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001091 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001092 }
1093
1094 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1095 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1096 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001097 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1098 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001099
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001100 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001101 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001102 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001103 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001104 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001105 }
1106
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001107 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001108 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1109 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001110 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001111 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1112 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001113
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001114 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1115 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1116 FitWeights(Weights);
1117
1118 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1119
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001120 NewSI->setMetadata(
1121 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1122 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001123 }
1124
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001125 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001126
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001127 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1128 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1129 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001130 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001131 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1132 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001133 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001134 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001135 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001136 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1137 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001138 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001139 }
1140 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1141 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001142
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001143 Changed = true;
1144 }
1145 }
1146 return Changed;
1147}
1148
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001149// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1150// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1151// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001152static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1153 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001154 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001155 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001156 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001157 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1158 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1159 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001160 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001161 return false;
1162 }
1163 }
1164 }
1165 return true;
1166}
1167
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001168static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1169
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001170/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1171/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1172/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001173static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001174 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001175 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1176 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1177 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1178 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1179 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001180 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1181 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001182
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001183 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1184 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1185
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001186 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001187 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1188 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1189 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1190 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1191 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001192 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001193 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001194 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001195 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001196 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001197 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001198 return false;
1199
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001200 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001201
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001202 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001203 do {
1204 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1205 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1206 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1207 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001208
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001209 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1210 return Changed;
1211
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001212 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1213 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1214 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001215 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001216 if (!I2->use_empty())
1217 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001218 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001219 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1220 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1221 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1222 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1223 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1224 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1225 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1226 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1227 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1228 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001229 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001230 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001231 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001232
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001233 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1234 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001235 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1236 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1237 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1238 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1239 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001240 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001241 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001242 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001243 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001244 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245
1246 return true;
1247
1248HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001249 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1250 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001251 return Changed;
1252
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001253 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001254 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001255 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001256 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1257 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1258 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1259 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1260 continue;
1261
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001262 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1263 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1264 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1265 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001266 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001267
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001268 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001269 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001270 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001271 return Changed;
1272 }
1273 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001274
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001275 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001276 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001277 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001278 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001279 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1280 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001281 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001282 }
1283
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001284 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001285 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1286 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1287 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1288 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001289 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001290 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001291 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001292 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001293 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001294 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1295 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001296 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1297 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001298
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001299 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1300 // that determines the right value.
1301 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001302 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001303 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1304 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1305 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001306
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001307 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1308 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1309 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1310 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001311 }
1312 }
1313
1314 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001315 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1316 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001317
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001318 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001319 return true;
1320}
1321
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001322/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001323/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1324/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1325/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1326static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1327 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1328 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1329 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1330
1331 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1332 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001333 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1334 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1335 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001336 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001337 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1338 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1339 return false;
1340 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001341 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1342 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1343 return false;
1344
1345 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001346 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001347 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001348 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001349 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1350 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001351 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001352 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001353 } else {
1354 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1355 break;
1356 }
1357 }
1358 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1359 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001360
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001361 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1362 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1363 // instructions in an identical order.
1364 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001365 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1366 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1367 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001368 // Skip debug info.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001369 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1))
1370 ++RI1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001371 if (RI1 == RE1)
1372 return false;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001373 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2))
1374 ++RI2;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001375 if (RI2 == RE2)
1376 return false;
1377 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1378 ++RI1;
1379 ++RI2;
1380
1381 bool Changed = false;
1382 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1383 // Skip debug info.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001384 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1))
1385 ++RI1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001386 if (RI1 == RE1)
1387 return Changed;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001388 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2))
1389 ++RI2;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001390 if (RI2 == RE2)
1391 return Changed;
1392
1393 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001394 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001395 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1396 // perform the same operation.
1397 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001398 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) ||
1399 isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) || I1->isEHPad() || I2->isEHPad() ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001400 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1401 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1402 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001403 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() || !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001404 return Changed;
1405
1406 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001407 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001408 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1409 bool SwapOpnds = false;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001410 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 && ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001411 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1412 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1413 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1414 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1415 SwapOpnds = true;
1416 }
1417 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1418 if (SwapOpnds)
1419 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1420 return Changed;
1421 }
1422
1423 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1424 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1425 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001426 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001427 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001428 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1429 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1430 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001431 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1432 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001433 if (Op1Idx != ~0U || isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001434 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1435 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1436 if (SwapOpnds)
1437 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1438 return Changed;
1439 }
1440 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1441 Op1Idx = I;
1442 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1443 }
1444
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001445 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1446 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1447
1448 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1449 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1450 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1451 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1452 if (!NewPN) {
1453 NewPN =
1454 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001455 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001456 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1457 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1458 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1459 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001460 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1461 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001462 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001463 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1464 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001465
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001466 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1467 // instruction in the basic block down.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00001468 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == &BB1->front()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == &BB2->front());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001469 // Sink the instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001470 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd->getIterator(),
1471 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001472 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1473 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1474 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1475
1476 if (!I2->use_empty())
1477 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1478 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001479 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1480 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001481 I2->eraseFromParent();
1482
1483 if (UpdateRE1)
1484 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1485 if (UpdateRE2)
1486 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001487 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001488 NumSinkCommons++;
1489 Changed = true;
1490 }
1491 return Changed;
1492}
1493
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001494/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1495/// conditional block.
1496///
1497/// We are looking for code like the following:
1498/// BrBB:
1499/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1500/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1501/// ... // function).
1502/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1503/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1504/// ThenBB:
1505/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1506/// br label EndBB
1507/// EndBB:
1508/// ...
1509/// We are going to transform this into:
1510/// BrBB:
1511/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1512/// ... //
1513/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1514/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1515/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1516/// ...
1517///
1518/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1519/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001520static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1521 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001522 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1523 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001524 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001525
1526 // Volatile or atomic.
1527 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001528 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001529
1530 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1531
1532 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001533 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001534 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1535 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1536 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001537 // Skip debug info.
1538 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1539 continue;
1540 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001541
1542 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001543 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001544 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001545
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001546 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1547 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1548 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1549 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1550 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001551 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001552 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001553 }
1554
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001555 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001556}
1557
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001558/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001559///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001560/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1561/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1562/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1563/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1564/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1565///
1566/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1567/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1568/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1569/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1570///
1571///
1572/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1573/// \code
1574/// BB:
1575/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1576/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1577/// ThenBB:
1578/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001579/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001580/// EndBB:
1581/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1582/// ...
1583/// \endcode
1584///
1585/// Into this IR:
1586/// \code
1587/// BB:
1588/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1589/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1590/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1591/// ...
1592/// \endcode
1593///
1594/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001595static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001596 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001597 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1598 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1599 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1600 return false;
1601
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001602 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1603 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1604
1605 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1606 // to swap the select operands later.
1607 bool Invert = false;
1608 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1609 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1610 Invert = true;
1611 }
1612 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1613
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001614 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1615 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1616 // - They are defined in BB, and
1617 // - They have no side effects, and
1618 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1619 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1620
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001621 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001622 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1623 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001624 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001625 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001626 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001627 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001628 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001629 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1630 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001631
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001632 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001633 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001634 ++SpeculationCost;
1635 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001636 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001637
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001638 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001639 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1640 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1641 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001642 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001643 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001644 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1645 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001646 return false;
1647
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001648 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1649 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1650 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1651
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001652 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001653 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001654 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001655 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001656 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001657 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001658 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1659
1660 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001661 }
1662 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001663
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001664 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1665 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1666 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001667 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1668 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1669 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001670 I != E; ++I)
1671 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001672 ++SpeculationCost;
1673 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001674 return false;
1675 }
1676
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001677 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1678 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001679 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001680 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001681 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1682 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001683
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001684 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001685 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001686 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001687 continue;
1688
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001689 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1690 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1691 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1692 return false;
1693
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001694 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001695 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1696 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1697 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001698 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1699
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001700 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1701 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001702 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001703 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1704 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001705 unsigned MaxCost =
1706 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001707 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001708 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001709
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001710 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1711 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1712 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001713 // constant expression.
1714 ++SpeculationCost;
1715 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001716 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001717 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001718
1719 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1720 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001721 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001722 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001723
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001724 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001725 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001726
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001727 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1728 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001729 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001730 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1731 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1732 if (Invert)
1733 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00001734 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
1735 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001736 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1737 }
1738
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001739 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1740 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001741 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001742 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1743
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001744 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001745 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1746 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001747
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001748 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001749 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001750 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1751 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1752 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1753 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1754 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1755 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1756
1757 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1758 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1759 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001760
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001761 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001762 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1763 // destinations were inverted.
1764 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001765 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001766 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00001767 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
1768 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001769 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1770 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001771 }
1772
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001773 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001774 return true;
1775}
1776
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001777/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001778static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1779 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001780 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001781
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001782 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001783 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1784 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001785 if (Size > 10)
1786 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001787 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001788
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001789 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001790 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001791 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1792 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001793 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
1794 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001795 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001796
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001797 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1798 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001799
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001800 return true;
1801}
1802
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001803/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1804/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1805/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001806static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001807 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1808 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001809 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1810 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001811 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1812 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001813
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001814 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1815 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001816 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001817 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001818 }
1819
1820 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001821 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
1822 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001823
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001824 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
1825 if (llvm::any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
1826 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1827 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1828 }))
1829 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001830
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001831 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1832 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001833 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001834 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001835 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
1836 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001837
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001838 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1839 // branch to RealDest.
1840 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1841 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001842
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001843 if (RealDest == BB)
1844 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001845 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001846 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
1847 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001848
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001849 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1850 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1851 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1852 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001853 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
1854 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
1855 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001856 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001857
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001858 // Update PHI nodes.
1859 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001860
1861 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1862 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1863 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1864 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001865 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001866 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1867 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1868 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1869 continue;
1870 }
1871 // Clone the instruction.
1872 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001873 if (BBI->hasName())
1874 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001875
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001876 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001877 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
1878 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001879 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1880 *i = PI->second;
1881 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001882
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001883 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001884 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001885 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1886 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
1887 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
1888 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
1889 N = nullptr;
1890 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001891 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001892 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001893 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001894 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001895 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1896 if (N)
1897 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001898 }
1899
1900 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1901 // to EdgeBB instead.
1902 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1903 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1904 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1905 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1906 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1907 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001908
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001909 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001910 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001911 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001912
1913 return false;
1914}
1915
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001916/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
1917/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001918static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1919 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001920 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1921 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1922 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1923 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1924 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1925 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001926 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1927 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1928 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001929 if (!IfCond ||
1930 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1931 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1932 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001933
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001934 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1935 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1936 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1937 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1938 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1939 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1940 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1941 if (NumPhis > 2)
1942 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001943
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001944 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1945 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1946 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001947 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001948 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1949 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001950 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1951 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001952
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001953 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1954 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001955 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001956 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001957 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001958 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001959 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001960
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001961 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001962 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001963 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001964 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001965 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001966 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001967
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001968 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001969 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1970 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001971 if (!PN)
1972 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001973
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001974 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1975 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1976 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1977 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1978 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1979 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1980 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001981
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001982 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
1983 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
1984 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
1985 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001986 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001987 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1988 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1989 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001990 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001991 } else {
1992 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001993 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
1994 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001995 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001996 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001997 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
1998 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001999 return false;
2000 }
2001 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002002
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002003 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002004 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002005 } else {
2006 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002007 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2008 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002009 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002010 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002011 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2012 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002013 return false;
2014 }
2015 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002016
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002017 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002018 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002019
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002020 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2021 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002022 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002023 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002024
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002025 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2026 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002027 if (IfBlock1)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002028 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002029 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002030 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002031 if (IfBlock2)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002032 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002033 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002034 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002035
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002036 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2037 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002038 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002039 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002040
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002041 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2042 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2043 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002044 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002045 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002046
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002047 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2048 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2049 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2050 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002051 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2052 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002053 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002054 return true;
2055}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002056
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002057/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2058/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002059/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002060static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002061 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002062 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2063 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2064 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2065 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2066 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002067
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002068 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2069 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2070 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002071 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002072 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002073 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002074 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002075
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002076 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002077 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2078 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2079 // branch into a return.
2080 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2081 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2082 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002083 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002084 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002085 return true;
2086 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002087
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002088 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2089 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2090 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2091 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002092
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002093 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2094 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2095 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2096 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2097 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2098 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2099 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002100
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002101 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2102 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2103 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2104 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2105 // safe.
2106 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2107 if (TCV->canTrap())
2108 return false;
2109 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2110 if (FCV->canTrap())
2111 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002112
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002113 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2114 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2115 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2116 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002117
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002118 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2119 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002120 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002121 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002122 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2123 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2124 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2125 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002126 TrueValue =
2127 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002128 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002129 }
2130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002131 Value *RI =
2132 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002133
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002134 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002135
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002136 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002137 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002138 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002139
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002140 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2141
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002142 return true;
2143}
2144
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002145/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002146/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002147static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002148 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2149 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002150 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2151 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002152 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2153 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2154 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2155 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2156 return true;
2157 }
2158 }
2159 return false;
2160}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002161
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002162/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2163/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2164/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2165static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2166 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2167 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2168 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2169 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2170 bool PredHasWeights =
2171 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2172 bool SuccHasWeights =
2173 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2174 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2175 if (!PredHasWeights)
2176 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2177 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2178 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2179 return true;
2180 } else {
2181 return false;
2182 }
2183}
2184
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002185/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2186/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2187/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002188bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002189 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002190
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002191 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002192 if (BI->isConditional())
2193 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2194 else {
2195 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2196 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2197 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2198 // predecessor.
2199 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2200 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2201 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2202 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2203 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002204 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002205 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002206 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2207 Cond = Curr;
2208 break;
2209 }
2210 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2211 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2212 return false;
2213 }
2214 }
2215
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002216 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002217 return false;
2218 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002219
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002220 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2221 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002222 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002223
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002224 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002225 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002226
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002227 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002228 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2229 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002230
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002231 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002232 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002233
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002234 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2235 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2236 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2237 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2238 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2239 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002240 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002241 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2242 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2243 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002244 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002245 return false;
2246 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2247 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2248 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2249 return false;
2250 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2251 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2252 // and Cond.
2253 ++NumBonusInsts;
2254 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2255 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2256 return false;
2257 }
2258
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002259 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2260 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2261 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2262 if (CE->canTrap())
2263 return false;
2264 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2265 if (CE->canTrap())
2266 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002267
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002268 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002269 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002270 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002271 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2272 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002273
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002274 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2275 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002276 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002277
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002278 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2279 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2280 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002281 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002282 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002283 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002284 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2285 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002286 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002287
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002288 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002289 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002290 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002291
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002292 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002293 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002294 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002295 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002296 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002297 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2298 Opc = Instruction::And;
2299 InvertPredCond = true;
2300 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2301 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2302 InvertPredCond = true;
2303 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002304 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002305 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002306 } else {
2307 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2308 continue;
2309 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002310
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002311 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002312 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002313
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002314 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2315 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002316 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002317
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002318 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2319 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2320 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2321 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002322 NewCond =
2323 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002324 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002325
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002326 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002327 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002328 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002329
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002330 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002331 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002332 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2333 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2334 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002335 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002336 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002337 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002338 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2339 continue;
2340 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2341 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002342 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002343 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002344
2345 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2346 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2347 // only given the branch precondition.
2348 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2349 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002350 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002351
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002352 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2353 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002354 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002355 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002356
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002357 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2358 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002359 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002360 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002361 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002362 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002363 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002364 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002365
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002366 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002367 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2368 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002369 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2370
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002371 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002372 bool HasWeights =
2373 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2374 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002375 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2376
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002377 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002378 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002379 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2380 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002381 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002382 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002383 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002384 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2385 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2386 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002387 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2388 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2389 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002390 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002391 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2392 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2393 }
2394 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002395 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002396 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2397 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002398 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002399 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002400 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2401 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2402 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2403 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002404 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2405 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002406 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2407 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2408 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002409 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2410 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2411 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2412
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002413 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2414 NewWeights.end());
2415 PBI->setMetadata(
2416 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2417 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002418 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002419 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002420 } else {
2421 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2422 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002423 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002424 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002425 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002426 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002427 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2428 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2429 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2430 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002431 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2432 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2433 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2434 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002435 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002436 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2437 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002438 } else {
2439 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2440 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2441 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002442 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2443 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002444 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002445 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2446 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2447 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2448 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002449 }
2450 }
2451 // Update PHI Node.
2452 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2453 MergedCond);
2454 }
2455 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2456 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2457 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2458 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002459 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002460
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002461 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2462 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2463
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002464 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002465 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2466 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2467 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002468
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002469 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002470 }
2471 return false;
2472}
2473
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002474// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2475// nullptr.
2476static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2477 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2478 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2479 if (!BB)
2480 continue;
2481 for (auto &I : *BB)
2482 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2483 if (S)
2484 // Multiple stores seen.
2485 return nullptr;
2486 else
2487 S = SI;
2488 }
2489 }
2490 return S;
2491}
2492
2493static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2494 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2495 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2496 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2497 //
2498 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2499 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2500 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2501 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2502 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2503 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2504 // one.
2505 //
2506 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2507 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2508 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2509 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2510 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002511
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002512 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2513 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2514 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2515 if (!AlternativeV)
2516 break;
2517
2518 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2519 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2520 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2521 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2522 break;
2523 PHI = nullptr;
2524 }
2525 if (PHI)
2526 return PHI;
2527
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002528 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2529 if (!AlternativeV &&
2530 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2531 return V;
2532
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002533 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002534 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2535 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2536 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002537 PHI->addIncoming(
2538 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002539 return PHI;
2540}
2541
2542static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2543 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2544 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2545 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2546 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2547 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2548 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2549 };
2550
2551 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2552 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2553 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2554 if (!BB)
2555 return true;
2556 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2557 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2558 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002559 unsigned N = 0;
2560 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2561 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2562 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2563 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2564 ++N;
2565 // Free instructions.
2566 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2567 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2568 continue;
2569 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002570 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002571 }
2572 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002573 };
2574
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002575 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2576 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2577 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002578 return false;
2579
2580 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2581 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2582 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2583 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2584 // testing.
2585 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2586 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2587 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2588 return false;
2589
2590 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2591 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2592 return false;
2593
2594 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2595 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2596 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2597 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2598 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2599 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2600 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2601 //
2602 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2603 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2604 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2605 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2606 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2607 return false;
2608 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2609 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2610 return false;
2611 if (QTB)
2612 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2613 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2614 return false;
2615 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2616 I != E; ++I)
2617 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2618 return false;
2619
2620 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2621 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2622 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2623 ->getCondition();
2624 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2625 ->getCondition();
2626
2627 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2628 PStore->getParent());
2629 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2630 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2631
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002632 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2633
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002634 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2635 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2636
2637 if (InvertPCond)
2638 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2639 if (InvertQCond)
2640 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2641 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2642
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002643 auto *T =
2644 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002645 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2646 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2647 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2648 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2649 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2650 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2651
2652 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2653 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002654
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002655 return true;
2656}
2657
2658static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2659 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2660 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2661 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2662 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2663 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2664 // PBI and QBI.
2665 //
2666 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2667 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2668 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2669 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2670 //
2671 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2672 //
2673 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2674 // / \ | \
2675 // PTB PFB | PFB
2676 // \ / | /
2677 // QBI QBI
2678 // / \ | \
2679 // QTB QFB | QFB
2680 // \ / | /
2681 // PostBB PostBB
2682 //
2683 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2684 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2685 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002686 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002687 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2688 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2689 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2690 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2691 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2692
2693 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2694 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2695 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2696 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2697 InvertPCond = true;
2698 }
2699 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2700 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2701 InvertQCond = true;
2702 }
2703
2704 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2705 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2706 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2707 PTB = nullptr;
2708 if (QTB == PostBB)
2709 QTB = nullptr;
2710
2711 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2712 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2713 // predecessor.
2714 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002715 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002716 };
2717 if (!PostBB ||
2718 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2719 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2720 return false;
2721 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2722 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2723 return false;
2724 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2725 return false;
2726
2727 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2728 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002729 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002730 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2731 if (!BB)
2732 continue;
2733 for (auto &I : *BB)
2734 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2735 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2736 }
2737 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2738 if (!BB)
2739 continue;
2740 for (auto &I : *BB)
2741 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2742 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2743 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002744
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002745 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2746 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2747 // clear what it contains.
2748 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2749
2750 bool Changed = false;
2751 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2752 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2753 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2754 return Changed;
2755}
2756
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002757/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2758/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002759/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2760/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002761static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2762 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002763 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2764 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002765
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002766 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002767 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002768 // this conditional branch redundant.
2769 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2770 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2771 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2772 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2773 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2774 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2775 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002776 BI->setCondition(
2777 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
2778 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002779 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002780
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002781 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2782 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2783 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2784 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002785 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002786 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2787 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2788 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002789 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2790 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2791 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002792 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002793 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002794 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
2795 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002796 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2797 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002798 NewPN->addIncoming(
2799 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
2800 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002801 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002802 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002803 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002804 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002805
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002806 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002807 return true;
2808 }
2809 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002810
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002811 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2812 if (CE->canTrap())
2813 return false;
2814
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002815 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2816 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2817 // merged store at the end.
2818 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2819 return true;
2820
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002821 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002822 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002823 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002824 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2825 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2826 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2827 ++BBI;
2828 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002829 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002830
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002831 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002832 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2833 PBIOp = 0;
2834 BIOp = 0;
2835 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2836 PBIOp = 0;
2837 BIOp = 1;
2838 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2839 PBIOp = 1;
2840 BIOp = 0;
2841 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2842 PBIOp = 1;
2843 BIOp = 1;
2844 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002845 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002846 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002847
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002848 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2849 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2850 // keep getting unwound.
2851 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2852 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002853
2854 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002855 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2856 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002857
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002858 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2859 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2860 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2861
2862 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002863 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002864 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
2865 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002866 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2867 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002868
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002869 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2870 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2871 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2872 if (CE->canTrap())
2873 return false;
2874
2875 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2876 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2877 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2878 if (CE->canTrap())
2879 return false;
2880 }
2881
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002882 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002883 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002884
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002885 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002886 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002887
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002888 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2889 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2890 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2891 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2892 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2893 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2894 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2895 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2896 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2897 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002898 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
2899 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002900 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2901 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002902 }
2903
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002904 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002905
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002906 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2907 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002908
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002909 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2910 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002911 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002912 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002913 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002914
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002915 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2916 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002917 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002918
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002919 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002920 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002921
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002922 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2923 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2924 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2925 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002926
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002927 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2928 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002929 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002930 bool HasWeights =
2931 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2932 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002933 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002934 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2935 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2936 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2937 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002938 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2939 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2940 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002941 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2942 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2943 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00002944 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002945 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2946
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002947 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00002948 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2949 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002950 }
2951
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002952 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2953 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002954 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002955
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002956 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2957 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2958 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2959 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002960 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002961 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2962 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2963 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2964 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2965 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2966 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2967 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002968 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
2969 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002970 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00002971 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
2972 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
2973 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
2974 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002975 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00002976 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2977 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2978 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2979 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2980 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
2981 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
2982 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
2983 PredOther * SuccCommon};
2984
2985 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2986
2987 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2988 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2989 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
2990 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002991 }
2992 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002993
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002994 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2995 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002996
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002997 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2998 // one fewer predecessor.
2999 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003000}
3001
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003002// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3003// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003004// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3005// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3006// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3007static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003008 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3009 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003010 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003011 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3012 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3013 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3014 // successor.
3015 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003016 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003017
3018 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003019 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003020 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3021 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003022 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003023 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003024 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003025 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003026 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3027 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003028 }
3029
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003030 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3031 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3032
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003033 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003034 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003035 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3036 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3037 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003038 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003039 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003040 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3041 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003042 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3043 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3044 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003045 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3046 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003047 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003048 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3049 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3050 // terminator must be unreachable.
3051 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3052 } else {
3053 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3054 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3055 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003056 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003057 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003058 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003059 else
3060 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003061 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003062 }
3063
3064 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3065 return true;
3066}
3067
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003068// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003069// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3070// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3071// unconditional otherwise.
3072static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3073 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3074 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3075 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3076 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3077 return false;
3078
3079 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3080 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003081 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3082 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003083
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003084 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3085 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3086 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3087 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3088 if (HasWeights) {
3089 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3090 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003091 TrueWeight =
3092 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3093 FalseWeight =
3094 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003095 }
3096 }
3097
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003098 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003099 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3100 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003101}
3102
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003103// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003104// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3105// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3106// with
3107// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3108static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3109 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3110 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3111 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3112 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3113 return false;
3114
3115 // Extract the actual blocks.
3116 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3117 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3118
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003119 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003120 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3121 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003122}
3123
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003124/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3125/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003126/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3127/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3128/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3129/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3130/// like:
3131///
3132/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3133/// DEFAULT:
3134/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3135/// br label %end
3136/// end:
3137/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003138///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003139/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3140/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003141static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003142 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3143 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3144 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003145 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003146
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003147 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3148 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003149 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3150 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003151
3152 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3153 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003154
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003155 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3156 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3157 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3158 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003159 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3160 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003161
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003162 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3163 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3164 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003165
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003166 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3167 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3168 // away.
3169 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3170 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3171 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3172 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003173
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003174 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003175 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003176 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3177 }
3178 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003179 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003180 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003181
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003182 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3183 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3184 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003185 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003186 Value *V;
3187 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3188 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3189 else
3190 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003191
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003192 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3193 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3194 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003195 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003196 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003197
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003198 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3199 // the block.
3200 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003201 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003202 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003203 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3204 return false;
3205
3206 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3207 // true in the PHI.
3208 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003209 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003210
3211 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3212 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3213
3214 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3215 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3216 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3217 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3218
3219 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3220 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003221 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3222 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003223 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3224 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3225 if (HasWeights) {
3226 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3227 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3228 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003229 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003230 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3231
3232 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003233 SI->setMetadata(
3234 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3235 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003236 }
3237 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003238 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003239
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003240 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003241 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3242 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3243 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003244 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3245 return true;
3246}
3247
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003248/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003249/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3250/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003251static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3252 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003253 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003254 if (!Cond)
3255 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003256
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003257 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3258 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3259 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003260
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003261 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003262 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3263 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003264 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003265 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3266 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3267 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003268
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003269 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003270 if (!CompVal)
3271 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003272
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003273 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3274 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3275 return false;
3276
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003277 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3278
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003279 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3280 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3281 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3282 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003283
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003284 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003285 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003286 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3287 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003288
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003289 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3290 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3291
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003292 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3293 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003294 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3295 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3296 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003297
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003298 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003299
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003300 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003301 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3302 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003303
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003304 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3305 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3306 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3307 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003308 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3309 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003310 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3311 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003312 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3313
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003314 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003315 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003316 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003317 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003318
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003319 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003320
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003321 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3322 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003323 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003324
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003325 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003326 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003327 BB = NewBB;
3328 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003329
3330 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003331 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3332 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003333 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3334 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003335 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003336
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003337 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003338 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003339
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003340 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3341 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3342 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003343
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003344 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3345 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3346 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003347 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003348 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3349 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003350 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003351 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3352 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003353
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003354 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3355 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003356
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003357 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003358 return true;
3359}
3360
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003361bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003362 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3363 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3364 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3365 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3366 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3367 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003368
3369 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003370}
3371
3372// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3373bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3374 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3375
3376 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3377 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3378 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003379 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003380 while (++I != E)
3381 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3382 return false;
3383
3384 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3385 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3386
3387 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003388 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3389 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003390 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3391 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3392
3393 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3394 // it has other dependents.
3395 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3396 continue;
3397
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003398 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003399 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3400 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3401 continue;
3402
3403 bool isTrivial = true;
3404
3405 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3406 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3407 while (++I != E)
3408 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3409 isTrivial = false;
3410 break;
3411 }
3412
3413 if (isTrivial)
3414 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3415 }
3416
3417 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003418 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3419 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003420
3421 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3422 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3423 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3424 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3425 // to remove them all.
3426 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3427 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3428
3429 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3430 PI != PE;) {
3431 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3432 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3433 }
3434
3435 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3436 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3437 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3438 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3439 // predecessors.
3440 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3441 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3442 }
3443
3444 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3445 if (pred_empty(BB))
3446 BB->eraseFromParent();
3447
3448 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3449}
3450
3451// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3452bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003453 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3454 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003455 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3456 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003457
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003458 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3459 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003460 while (++I != E)
3461 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3462 return false;
3463
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003464 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003465 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3466 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3467 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003468 }
3469
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003470 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3471 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003472 if (LoopHeaders)
3473 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003474 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003475}
3476
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003477static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003478 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3479 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3480 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3481 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3482 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3483 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3484 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3485 // simplified.
3486 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003487 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3488 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003489 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3490 return false;
3491
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003492 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3493 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3494 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3495 return false;
3496
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003497 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003498 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003499 while (++I != E) {
3500 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3501 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003502 return false;
3503
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003504 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3505 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3506 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3507 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3508 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3509 break;
3510 default:
3511 return false;
3512 }
3513 }
3514
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003515 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3516 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003517 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003518 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003519
3520 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3521 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3522 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3523 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3524 // are both EH pads).
3525 if (UnwindDest) {
3526 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3527 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003528 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003529 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003530 I != IE; ++I) {
3531 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003532
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003533 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003534 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003535 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003536 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3537 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3538 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3539 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3540 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3541 // pad being removed.
3542 //
3543 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3544 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3545 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3546 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3547 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3548 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3549
3550 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3551 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3552
3553 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3554 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3555 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3556 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003557 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003558 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003559 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3560 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3561 }
3562 } else {
3563 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3564 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3565 // predecessors with this value.
3566 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3567 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3568 }
3569 }
3570 }
3571
3572 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003573 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003574 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3575 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003576 I != IE;) {
3577 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3578 // being moved to another block.
3579 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3580 if (PN->use_empty())
3581 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3582 // when we erase BB below.
3583 continue;
3584
3585 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3586 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3587 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3588 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3589 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3590 if (pred != BB)
3591 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3592 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3593 }
3594 }
3595
3596 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3597 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3598 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003599 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003600 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003601 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003602 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003603 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003604 }
3605 }
3606
3607 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3608 BB->eraseFromParent();
3609 return true;
3610}
3611
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003612// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3613static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3614 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3615 // with.
3616 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3617 if (!UnwindDest)
3618 return false;
3619
3620 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3621 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3622 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3623 return false;
3624
3625 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3626 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3627 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3628 return false;
3629
3630 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3631 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3632 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3633 // funclet bundle operands.
3634 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3635 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3636 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3637 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3638 // destination.
3639 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3640 RI->eraseFromParent();
3641
3642 return true;
3643}
3644
3645bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003646 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3647 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3648 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3649 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3650 return false;
3651
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003652 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003653 return true;
3654
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003655 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003656 return true;
3657
3658 return false;
3659}
3660
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003661bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003662 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003663 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3664 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003665
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003666 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003667 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3668 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003669 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3670 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003671 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3672 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3673 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3674 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3675 else
3676 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3677 }
3678 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003679
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003680 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003681 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003682 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3683 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3684 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003685 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003686 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003687 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003688
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003689 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003690 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003691 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3692 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003693 if (LoopHeaders)
3694 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003695 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003696
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003697 return true;
3698 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003699
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003700 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3701 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3702 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3703 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3704 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003705
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003706 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3707 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3708 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003709 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003710 return true;
3711 }
3712 return false;
3713}
3714
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003715bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3716 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003717
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003718 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003719
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003720 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3721 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003722 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3723 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003724 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003725 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3726 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3727 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003728 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3729 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003730
3731 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003732 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003733 if (SI->isVolatile())
3734 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003735 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003736 if (LI->isVolatile())
3737 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003738 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003739 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3740 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003741 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003742 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3743 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003744 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3745 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3746 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3747 // default.
3748 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3749 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3750 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3751 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003752 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3753 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003754 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003755 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003756 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3757 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3758 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3759 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003760 }
3761
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003762 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3763 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3764 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003765 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003766 Changed = true;
3767 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003768
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003769 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3770 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003771 if (&BB->front() != UI)
3772 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003773
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003774 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003775 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3776 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003777 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003778 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003779 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3780 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3781 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3782 TI->eraseFromParent();
3783 Changed = true;
3784 }
3785 } else {
3786 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003787 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003788 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3789 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003790 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003791 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3792 Changed = true;
3793 }
3794 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003795 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003796 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
3797 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003798 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003799 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3800 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003801 --i;
3802 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003803 Changed = true;
3804 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003805 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3806 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3807 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3808 Changed = true;
3809 }
3810 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3811 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3812 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3813 Changed = true;
3814 continue;
3815 }
3816
3817 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3818 E = CSI->handler_end();
3819 I != E; ++I) {
3820 if (*I == BB) {
3821 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3822 --I;
3823 --E;
3824 Changed = true;
3825 }
3826 }
3827 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3828 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3829 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3830 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3831 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3832 } else {
3833 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3834 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3835 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3836 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3837 }
3838 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3839 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3840 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3841 Changed = true;
3842 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003843 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003844 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3845 TI->eraseFromParent();
3846 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003847 }
3848 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003849
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003850 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003851 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003852 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3853 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003854 if (LoopHeaders)
3855 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003856 return true;
3857 }
3858
3859 return Changed;
3860}
3861
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003862static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3863 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3864
3865 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3866 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3867 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3868 return false;
3869 }
3870 return true;
3871}
3872
3873/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3874/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003875static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003876 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003877
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003878 bool HasDefault =
3879 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003880
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003881 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3882 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3883 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003884 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3885 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003886
3887 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3888 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003889 if (!DestA)
3890 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003891 if (Dest == DestA) {
3892 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3893 continue;
3894 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003895 if (!DestB)
3896 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003897 if (Dest == DestB) {
3898 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3899 continue;
3900 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003901 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003902 }
3903
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003904 assert(DestA && DestB &&
3905 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003906 assert(DestA != DestB);
3907 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3908 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3909 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3910
3911 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3912 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3913 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3914 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3915 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3916 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3917 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3918 OtherDest = DestB;
3919 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3920 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3921 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3922 OtherDest = DestA;
3923 } else
3924 return false;
3925
3926 // Start building the compare and branch.
3927
3928 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003929 Constant *NumCases =
3930 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003931
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003932 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3933 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003934 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3935
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003936 Value *Cmp;
3937 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003938 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003939 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3940 else
3941 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003942 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003943
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003944 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003945 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3946 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003947 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3948 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003949 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3950 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3951 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3952 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3953 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3954 else
3955 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3956 }
3957 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3958 TrueWeight /= 2;
3959 FalseWeight /= 2;
3960 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003961 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003962 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
3963 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
3964 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003965 }
3966 }
3967
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003968 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3969 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3970 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003971 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
3972 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003973 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003974 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3975 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003976 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3977 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003978 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
3979 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003980 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3981 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3982 }
3983
3984 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003985 SI->eraseFromParent();
3986
3987 return true;
3988}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003989
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003990/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003991/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003992static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3993 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003994 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003995 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003996 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003997 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003998
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00003999 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4000 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4001 // bits are in the condition value.
4002 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
4003 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4004
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004005 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004006 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004007 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004008 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4009 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4010 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004011 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004012 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004013 }
4014 }
4015
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004016 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4017 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004018 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4019 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004020 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004021 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4022 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4023 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004024 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004025 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004026 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004027 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004028 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004029 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4030 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004031 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4032 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004033 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4034 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4035 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4036 return true;
4037 }
4038
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004039 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4040 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4041 if (HasWeight) {
4042 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4043 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4044 }
4045
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004046 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004047 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4048 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004049 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004050 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004051 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004052 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004053 Weights.pop_back();
4054 }
4055
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004056 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004057 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004058 SI->removeCase(Case);
4059 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004060 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004061 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4062 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004063 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4064 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004065 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004066
4067 return !DeadCases.empty();
4068}
4069
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004070/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4071/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004072/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4073/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4074/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4075static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004076 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004077 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004078 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004079 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004080 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004081
4082 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4083 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004084 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004085
4086 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4087
4088 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4089 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4090 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4091 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4092
4093 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004094 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4095 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004096
4097 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4098 return PHI;
4099 }
4100
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004101 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004102}
4103
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004104/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4105/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4106/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004107/// Returns true if a change is made.
4108static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004109 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004110 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4111
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004112 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4113 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004114 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4115 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004116
4117 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004118 PHINode *PHI =
4119 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4120 if (!PHI)
4121 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004122
4123 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4124 }
4125
4126 bool Changed = false;
4127
4128 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004129 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4130 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004131 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004132 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004133
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004134 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4135 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004136
4137 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4138 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4139 Changed = true;
4140 }
4141
4142 return Changed;
4143}
4144
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004145/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004146/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00004147static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004148 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4149 return false;
4150 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4151 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004152
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004153 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
4154 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
4155
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004156 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
4157 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
4158 isa<UndefValue>(C);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004159}
4160
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004161/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004162/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004163static Constant *
4164LookupConstant(Value *V,
4165 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004166 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4167 return C;
4168 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4169}
4170
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004171/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004172/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4173/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004174/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004175static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004176ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4177 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004178 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004179 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4180 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004181 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004182 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4183 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4184 if (A->isNullValue())
4185 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004186 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004187 }
4188
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004189 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4190 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4191 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4192 COps.push_back(A);
4193 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004194 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004195 }
4196
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004197 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004198 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4199 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004200 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004201
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004202 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004203}
4204
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004205/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004206/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004207/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004208/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004209static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004210GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004211 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004212 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4213 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004214 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4215 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4216
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004217 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4218 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004219 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004220 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4221 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4222 ++I) {
4223 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4224 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4225 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4226 return false;
4227 Pred = CaseDest;
4228 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4229 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4230 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4231 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004232 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004233 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004234
4235 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4236 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4237 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4238 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4239 User *User = Use.getUser();
4240 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4241 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4242 continue;
4243 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4244 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4245 continue;
4246 return false;
4247 }
4248
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004249 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004250 } else {
4251 break;
4252 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004253 }
4254
4255 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4256 if (!*CommonDest)
4257 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4258 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4259 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4260 return false;
4261
4262 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4263 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4264 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4265 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4266 if (Idx == -1)
4267 continue;
4268
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004269 Constant *ConstVal =
4270 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004271 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004272 return false;
4273
4274 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4275 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4276 return false;
4277
4278 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4279 }
4280
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004281 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004282}
4283
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004284// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4285// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004286static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004287 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4288 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004289 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4290 if (I.first == Result) {
4291 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4292 return;
4293 }
4294 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004295 UniqueResults.push_back(
4296 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004297}
4298
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004299// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004300// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4301// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4302// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004303static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4304 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4305 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4306 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4307 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004308 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4309 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4310
4311 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4312 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4313 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4314 DL))
4315 return false;
4316
4317 // Only one value per case is permitted
4318 if (Results.size() > 1)
4319 return false;
4320 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4321
4322 // Check the PHI consistency.
4323 if (!PHI)
4324 PHI = Results[0].first;
4325 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4326 return false;
4327 }
4328 // Find the default result value.
4329 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4330 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4331 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4332 DL);
4333 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4334 // is unreachable.
4335 DefaultResult =
4336 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4337 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004338 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004339 return false;
4340
4341 return true;
4342}
4343
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004344// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4345// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004346// Example:
4347// switch (a) {
4348// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4349// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4350// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4351// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4352// default:
4353// return 4;
4354// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004355static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4356 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4357 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004358 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004359 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004360 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4361 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4362 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4363 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4364 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4365 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4366
4367 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4368 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4369 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4370 Value *const ValueCompare =
4371 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4372 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4373 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4374 }
4375 Value *const ValueCompare =
4376 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004377 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4378 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004379 }
4380
4381 return nullptr;
4382}
4383
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004384// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4385// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004386static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4387 Value *SelectValue,
4388 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4389 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4390 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4391 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4392 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4393
4394 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4395
4396 // Remove the switch.
4397 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4398 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4399
4400 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4401 continue;
4402 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4403 }
4404 SI->eraseFromParent();
4405}
4406
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004407/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004408/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4409/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4410static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004411 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004412 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4413 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4414 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4415 Constant *DefaultResult;
4416 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4417 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004418 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4419 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004420 return false;
4421 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4422 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4423 return false;
4424 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4425
4426 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004427 Value *SelectValue =
4428 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004429 if (SelectValue) {
4430 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4431 return true;
4432 }
4433 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4434 return false;
4435}
4436
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004437namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004438/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4439class SwitchLookupTable {
4440public:
4441 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4442 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4443 SwitchLookupTable(
4444 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4445 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4446 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004447
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004448 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4449 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4450 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004451
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004452 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4453 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4454 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4455 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004456
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004457private:
4458 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4459 // different ways.
4460 enum {
4461 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4462 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4463 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004464
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004465 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4466 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4467 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4468 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004469
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004470 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4471 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4472 // shift and mask operations.
4473 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004474
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004475 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4476 // instructions from the table.
4477 ArrayKind
4478 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004479
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004480 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4481 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004482
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004483 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4484 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4485 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004486
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004487 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4488 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4489 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004490
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004491 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4492 GlobalVariable *Array;
4493};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004494}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004495
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004496SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4497 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4498 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4499 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004500 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004501 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004502 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4503 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004504
4505 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004506 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004507
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004508 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4509
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004510 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004511 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004512 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4513 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4514 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004515 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004516
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004517 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004518 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4519
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004520 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004521 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004522 }
4523
4524 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004525 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004526 assert(DefaultValue &&
4527 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004528 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004529 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4530 if (!TableContents[I])
4531 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004532 }
4533
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004534 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004535 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004536 }
4537
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004538 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4539 // that single value.
4540 if (SingleValue) {
4541 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4542 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004543 }
4544
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004545 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4546 // table index.
4547 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4548 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4549 APInt PrevVal;
4550 APInt DistToPrev;
4551 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4552 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4553 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4554 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4555 if (!ConstVal) {
4556 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4557 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4558 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4559 break;
4560 }
4561 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4562 if (I != 0) {
4563 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4564 if (I == 1) {
4565 DistToPrev = Dist;
4566 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4567 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4568 break;
4569 }
4570 }
4571 PrevVal = Val;
4572 }
4573 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4574 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4575 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4576 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4577 ++NumLinearMaps;
4578 return;
4579 }
4580 }
4581
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004582 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004583 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004584 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004585 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4586 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4587 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004588 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4589 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4590 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4591 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4592 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004593 }
4594 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4595 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4596 Kind = BitMapKind;
4597 ++NumBitMaps;
4598 return;
4599 }
4600
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004601 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004602 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004603 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4604
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004605 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4606 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004607 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004608 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004609 Kind = ArrayKind;
4610}
4611
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004612Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004613 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004614 case SingleValueKind:
4615 return SingleValue;
4616 case LinearMapKind: {
4617 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4618 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4619 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4620 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4621 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4622 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4623 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4624 return Result;
4625 }
4626 case BitMapKind: {
4627 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4628 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004629
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004630 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4631 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4632 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4633 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004634
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004635 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4636 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4637 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4638 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004639
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004640 // Shift down.
4641 Value *DownShifted =
4642 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4643 // Mask off.
4644 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4645 }
4646 case ArrayKind: {
4647 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4648 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4649 uint64_t TableSize =
4650 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4651 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4652 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4653 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4654 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004655
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004656 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
4657 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4658 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
4659 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4660 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004661 }
4662 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4663}
4664
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004665bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004666 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004667 Type *ElementType) {
4668 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004669 if (!IT)
4670 return false;
4671 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4672 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004673
4674 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004675 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004676 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004677 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004678}
4679
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004680/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4681/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004682static bool
4683ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4684 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4685 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004686 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4687 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004688
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004689 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004690 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004691 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4692 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004693
4694 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004695 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004696
4697 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004698 AllTablesFitInRegister =
4699 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
4700 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004701
4702 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4703 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4704 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4705 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004706 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004707 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004708
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004709 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4710 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4711 return true;
4712
4713 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4714 if (HasIllegalType)
4715 return false;
4716
4717 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4718 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4719 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4720 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004721}
4722
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004723/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4724/// \code
4725/// if (idx < tablesize)
4726/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4727/// else
4728/// r = default_value;
4729/// if (r != default_value)
4730/// ...
4731/// \endcode
4732/// Is optimized to:
4733/// \code
4734/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4735/// if (cond)
4736/// r = table[idx];
4737/// else
4738/// r = default_value;
4739/// if (cond)
4740/// ...
4741/// \endcode
4742/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004743static void reuseTableCompare(
4744 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
4745 Constant *DefaultValue,
4746 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004747
4748 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4749 if (!CmpInst)
4750 return;
4751
4752 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4753 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4754 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4755 return;
4756
4757 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4758 if (!CmpOp1)
4759 return;
4760
4761 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4762 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4763 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4764
4765 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4766 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4767 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4768 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4769 return;
4770
4771 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4772 // compare result.
4773 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4774 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004775 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004776 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4777 return;
4778 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4779 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4780 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004781
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004782 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4783 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4784 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4785 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4786 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4787 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4788 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4789 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4790 return;
4791 }
4792
4793 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4794 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4795 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4796 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4797 } else {
4798 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004799 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
4800 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4801 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004802 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4803 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4804 }
4805}
4806
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004807/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4808/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4809/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004810static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4811 const DataLayout &DL,
4812 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004813 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004814
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004815 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004816 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004817 return false;
4818
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004819 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4820 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4821
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004822 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4823 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4824 // string and lookup indices into that.
4825
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004826 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
4827 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004828 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4829 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004830 return false;
4831
4832 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004833 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004834 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4835 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4836 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4837 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4838
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004839 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004840 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
4841 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4842 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
4843 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
4844 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004845
4846 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4847 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4848 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4849 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4850 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4851 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4852
4853 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004854 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004855 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004856 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004857 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004858 return false;
4859
4860 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004861 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4862 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4863 Constant *Value = I.second;
4864 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4865 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4866 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004867 }
4868 }
4869
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004870 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004871 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004872 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4873 }
4874
4875 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4876 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4877 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4878 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4879
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004880 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4881 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004882 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004883 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004884 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004885
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004886 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4887 if (NeedMask) {
4888 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004889 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004890 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004891 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004892 return false;
4893 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004894
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004895 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4896 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4897 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004898 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004899 }
4900
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004901 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004902 return false;
4903
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004904 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004905 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004906 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
4907 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004908
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004909 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004910 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004911 Value *TableIndex =
4912 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004913
4914 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4915 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004916 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004917 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004918 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4919 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4920 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4921
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004922 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4923 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4924 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4925 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4926 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4927 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004928 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4929
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004930 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004931 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004932 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
4933 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004934 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004935 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
4936 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
4937 RangeCheckBranch =
4938 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004939 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004940
4941 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4942 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004943
4944 if (NeedMask) {
4945 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4946 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4947 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4948 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4949 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004950 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
4951 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004952
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004953 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4954 // unnecessary illegal types.
4955 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4956 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4957 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004958 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004959 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4960 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004961 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
4962 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004963 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4964 }
4965 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4966
4967 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4968 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4969 // else continue with table lookup.
4970 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004971 Value *MaskIndex =
4972 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
4973 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
4974 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
4975 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004976 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4977
4978 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4979 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4980 }
4981
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004982 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
4983 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4984 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4985 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
4986 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
4987 }
4988
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004989 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004990 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4991 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004992 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004993
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004994 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4995 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004996 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004997
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004998 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004999
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005000 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5001 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005002 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5003 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005004 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5005 ReturnedEarly = true;
5006 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005007 }
5008
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005009 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5010 // possible.
5011 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5012 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5013 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5014 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5015 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5016 }
5017 }
5018
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005019 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005020 }
5021
5022 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5023 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5024
5025 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005026 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005027 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005028
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005029 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005030 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005031 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5032 }
5033 SI->eraseFromParent();
5034
5035 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005036 if (NeedMask)
5037 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005038 return true;
5039}
5040
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005041static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5042 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5043 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5044 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5045 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5046 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5047 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
5048
5049 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5050}
5051
5052// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5053// of cases.
5054//
5055// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5056// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5057//
5058// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5059// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5060static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5061 const DataLayout &DL,
5062 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5063 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5064 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5065 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5066 return false;
5067 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5068 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5069 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5070 return false;
5071
5072 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5073 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5074 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5075 // as signed.
5076 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5077 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5078 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5079 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5080
5081 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5082 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5083 return false;
5084
5085 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5086 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5087 for (auto &V : Values)
5088 V -= Base;
5089
5090 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5091 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5092 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5093 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5094 for (auto &V : Values)
5095 GCD = llvm::GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
5096
5097 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5098 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5099 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5100 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5101 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5102 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5103 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5104 // as the key function.
5105 if (GCD <= 1 || !llvm::isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
5106 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5107 return false;
5108
5109 unsigned Shift = llvm::Log2_64(GCD);
5110 for (auto &V : Values)
5111 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5112
5113 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5114 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5115 return false;
5116
5117 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5118 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5119 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5120 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5121 //
5122 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5123 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5124 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5125 // default case.
5126
5127 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5128 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5129 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5130 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
5131 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC),
5132 Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift));
5133 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5134
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005135 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5136 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005137 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5138 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005139 C.setValue(
5140 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005141 }
5142 return true;
5143}
5144
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005145bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005146 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5147
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005148 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5149 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5150 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5151 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5152 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005153 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005154
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005155 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5156 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5157 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005158 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005159
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005160 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5161 // away into any preds.
5162 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5163 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5164 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5165 ++BBI;
5166 if (SI == &*BBI)
5167 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005168 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005169 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005170
5171 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005172 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005173 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005174
5175 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005176 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5177 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005178
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005179 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
5180 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005181
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005182 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005183 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005184
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005185 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5186 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005187
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005188 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5189 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5190
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005191 return false;
5192}
5193
5194bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5195 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5196 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005197
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005198 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5199 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5200 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5201 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005202 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005203 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5204 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005205 --i;
5206 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005207 Changed = true;
5208 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005209 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005210
5211 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5212 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5213 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5214 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5215 return true;
5216 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005217
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005218 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5219 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5220 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5221 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5222 return true;
5223 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005224
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005225 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5226 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005227 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005228 }
5229 return Changed;
5230}
5231
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005232/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5233/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5234/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5235/// a shared handler.
5236///
5237/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5238/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5239/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5240/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5241/// sinking in this file)
5242///
5243/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5244/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5245/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5246/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5247/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5248/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5249///
5250/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5251/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5252/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5253static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5254 BasicBlock *BB) {
5255 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5256 assert(Succ);
5257 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5258 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5259 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5260 return false;
5261
5262 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5263 if (BB == OtherPred)
5264 continue;
5265 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5266 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5267 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5268 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005269 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5270 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005271 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5272 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5273 continue;
5274
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005275 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005276 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5277 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5278 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5279 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5280 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005281 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5282 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005283 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5284 }
5285
5286 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5287 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005288 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5289 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5290 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005291 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5292 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5293 }
5294
5295 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5296 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5297 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5298 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5299 }
5300
5301 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5302 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5303 BI->eraseFromParent();
5304 return true;
5305 }
5306 return false;
5307}
5308
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005309bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5310 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005311 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005312
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005313 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5314 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005315
5316 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5317 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005318 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5319 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5320 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5321 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005322 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005323 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005324 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005325 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5326 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005327
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005328 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5329 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5330 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5331 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5332 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5333 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005334 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005335 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5336 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005337 return true;
5338 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005339
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005340 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5341 // equivalent.
5342 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005343 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5344 }
5345 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005346 return true;
5347 }
5348
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005349 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5350 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5351 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5352 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005353 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5354 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005355 return false;
5356}
5357
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005358static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5359 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5360 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5361 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5362 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5363 return nullptr;
5364 PredPred = PPred;
5365 }
5366 return PredPred;
5367}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005368
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005369bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005370 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005371
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005372 // Conditional branch
5373 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5374 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5375 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5376 // switch.
5377 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005378 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005379 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005380
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005381 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5382 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5383 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5384 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5385 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5386 ++I;
5387 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005388 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005389 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005390 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005391 ++I;
5392 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5393 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5394 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005395 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005396 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005397 }
5398 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005399
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005400 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005401 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005402 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005403
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005404 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5405 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5406 // of the BI branch.
5407 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5408 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5409 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5410 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5411 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5412 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5413 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5414 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5415 if (Implication) {
5416 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5417 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5418 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5419 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5420 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5421 BI->setCondition(CI);
5422 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5423 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5424 }
5425 }
5426 }
5427
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005428 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5429 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5430 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005431 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5432 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005433
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005434 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5435 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5436 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5437 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005438 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5439 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005440 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5441 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005442 } else {
5443 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005444 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005445 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5446 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5447 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005448 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5449 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005450 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005451 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005452 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005453 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005454 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5455 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5456 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005457 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5458 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005459 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005460
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005461 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5462 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5463 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5464 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005465 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005466 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005467
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005468 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005469 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5470 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005471 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005472 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005473 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005474
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005475 // Look for diamond patterns.
5476 if (MergeCondStores)
5477 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5478 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5479 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5480 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5481 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005482
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005483 return false;
5484}
5485
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005486/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5487static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5488 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5489 if (!C)
5490 return false;
5491
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005492 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005493 return false;
5494
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005495 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005496 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005497 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005498
5499 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5500 // control flow (eg. calls)
5501 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005502 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005503 return false;
5504
5505 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5506 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5507 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5508 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5509
5510 // Look through bitcasts.
5511 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5512 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5513
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005514 // Load from null is undefined.
5515 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005516 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5517 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005518
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005519 // Store to null is undefined.
5520 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005521 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005522 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5523 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005524
5525 // A call to null is undefined.
5526 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5527 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005528 }
5529 return false;
5530}
5531
5532/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005533/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005534static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5535 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5536 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5537 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5538 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5539 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5540 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5541 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5542 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5543 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5544 // destination from conditional branches.
5545 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5546 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5547 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005548 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5549 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005550 BI->eraseFromParent();
5551 return true;
5552 }
5553 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5554 }
5555
5556 return false;
5557}
5558
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005559bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005560 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005561
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005562 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005563 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005564
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005565 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5566 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005567 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005568 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005569 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5570 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5571 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005572 }
5573
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005574 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5575 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005576 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005577
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005578 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5579 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5580
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005581 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5582 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5583
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005584 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5585 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5586 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5587 //
5588 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5589 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005590
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005591 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5592
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005593 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5594 // eliminate it, do so now.
5595 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5596 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005597 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005598
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005599 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005600 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005601 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005602 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5603 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005604 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005605 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5606 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005607 }
5608 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005609 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5610 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005611 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005612 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5613 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005614 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005615 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5616 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5617 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005618 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005619 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5620 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005621 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005622 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5623 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5624 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005625 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005626 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5627 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5628 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005629 }
5630
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005631 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005632}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005633
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005634/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5635/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005636/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5637/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5638///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005639bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005640 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5641 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005642 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005643 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
5644 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005645}